2016 Jeep Cherokee Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2016 Jeep Cherokee Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
2016 Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
16KL74-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
First Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing
better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control.
Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it may not.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
injury. Drive carefully.
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts prosymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper- of the engine block.
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The
VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on
the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear
most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted
to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Identification Number
1
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . . . . .19
. . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .113
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .66
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM).
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Push Button Ignition.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Keyless Push Button Ignition
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put 1 — OFF
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
Emergency Key Removal (Keyless Push Button Ignition
System)
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
General Information
SENTRY KEY
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorfrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
or unlocked.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
2. This device must accept any interference received, Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
including interference that may cause undesired op- vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
eration.
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
Replacement Keys
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opauthorized dealer. This procedure consists of programeration.
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio door locks and liftgate release are disabled.
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Alarm will provide the following audible and visible
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
signals:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• The horn will pulse.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The park lamps and/or turn signals will flash.
• The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
Alarm will rearm itself.
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
To Arm The System
further information).
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
(RKE) transmitter.
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
3. If any doors are open, close them.
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
Rearming Of The System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
Vehicle Security Alarm.
valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if
equipped). Refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further inforpower liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
mation.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
door, the alarm will sound.
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furbecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
ther information.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
2
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the panic alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Undertransmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Emergency Key Removal
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Using The Panic Alarm
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start- you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
by the system.
other hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if
equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Separating Keyless Ignition Node Transmitter Case
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, and then 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opreplace the battery. When replacing the battery, match
eration.
the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved How To Use Remote Start
by the party responsible for compliance could void the All of the following conditions must be met before the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Shift Lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Doors closed
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Liftgate closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hazard switch off
NOTE:
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter • RKE PANIC button not pushed
may reduce this range.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if
the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start
prematurely:
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
third cycle.
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
NOTE:
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
Remote Start mode.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- Start request.
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
in the Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC/DID until you
push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/
push the START button.
STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the
ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
position.
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
NOTE:
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the feature will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- cycled to the ON/RUN position.
N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be actiEVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to “Elec- vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver more information on Remote Start Comfort System opInformation Display” in “Understanding Your Instru- eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel.”
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient user’s authority to operate the equipment.
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield DOOR LOCKS
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Manual Door Locks
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
timer and operation will continue.
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
indicator is visible.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and closing the door.
General Information
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition to the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
Power Door Lock Switch
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the your radio.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
power door locks if:
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enChild-Protection Door Lock system.
abled.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
2. All doors are closed.
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
placed in PARK.
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
4. Any door is opened.
unlocked position.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
search in any passive entry vehicle:
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
transmitter while a door is open.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
knobs.
handle while a door is open.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
the door is open.
Entry door handle.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
door panel switch and then close the doors.
finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and
it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
customer.
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC/DID (if equipped), all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
Location
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
into the electronic liftgate release.
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
General Information
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opLocking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in Vehicle⬙
eration.
remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
transmitter battery is dead.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTODown feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
to the first detent and release it when you want the
switch again to close the window.
window to stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoto hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
after the window is fully open.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
Reset AUTO-Up
push and release the window lockout button again
Should the AUTO-Up feature stop working, the window (setting it in the UP position).
probably needs to be reset. To reset AUTO-Up:
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry LOCK
button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the electronic liftgate release.
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” located in “Things To Know Before Starting”) or by pushing the LIFTGATE
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. Push the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel once will close the
liftgate only. This button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings),
and the liftgate chime will be audible. Refer to ⬙Uconnect
Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
(0 km/h).
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
gate trim panel.
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate switches.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate and then push it again to close.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Some of the most important safety features in your
within the same cycle, the system will automatically vehicle are the restraint systems:
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
• Seat Belt Systems
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a • Child Restraints
detection of an obstruction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
properly.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Seat Belt Systems
between occupants and the door and occupants could Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
be injured.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact happen far away from home or on your own street.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
Change Of Status
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the belts are buckled again.
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
WARNING!
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can
cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
shoulder belt.
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjustable Anchorage
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm .
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child worn snugly and positioned properly.
if they are wearing a seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. • ALR = Automatic Locking Retractor
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Children 12 years old and under should always be 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
•dedSupplemental
Side Air Bags
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
by:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
2
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, Passenger Seat
away from an inflating air bag.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occuquantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front paschild restraint; or
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
Front Passenger Seat
Front Passenger Air
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
Occupant Status
Bag Output
for the front passenger to be seated properly and propRear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
erly wearing the seat belt.
deployment
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Child, including a child in
Reduced-power
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the a forward-facing child
deployment OR Fullinflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if restraint or booster seat*
power deployment
the OCS estimates that:
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
deployment
light objects on it; or
Reduced-power
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas- Unoccupied seat
deployment
senger, including a child; or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru- • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
ment panel).
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
properly seated weight input, for example:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the •
OCS components must function as designed.
•
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
driver and front passenger, and position the front occutogether with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Front Air Bags.
Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in
vehicles equipped with rear seat SABs) seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
the seam on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
cover (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs).
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
“AIRBAG.”
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
WARNING!
2
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
or call 1–866–732–8243.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster
seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
(29.5 kg)
combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
forward-facing child restraint?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage?
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
back of the front passenger seat?
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraints may be removed in every
rear seating position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH—compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH—compatible position in your vehicle
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child
restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to
install the center child restraint and you must use the
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)
behind the front passenger.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing
and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint
an occupant or child restraint in the center seating
position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and
D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating position (3) for any occupant. The center
child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You must use
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in
position (3), behind the driver. You may use either
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing the child seat in position (1), behind the
front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tions to attach a tether anchor.
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
WARNING!
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
The head restraints may be removed?
moved in every rear seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR repath of the child restraint?
tractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintea collision.
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER
switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Seat Belts
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
system.
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after Defroster
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
the air directed against the windshield. See your authoAir Bag Warning Light
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to Floor Mat Safety Information
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .126
▫ Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .135
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .136
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .166
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .174
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . .178
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .179
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
. . .181
. . .183
. . .184
. . .184
. . .185
. . .185
. . .185
. . .186
. . .187
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .189
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .190
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .214
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .197
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .217
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .202 䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .203
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .206
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .237
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .252
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .253
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .282
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .283
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .287
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .294
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .295
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .300 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .303
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Cargo Extension Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops . . . . . . . .310
▫ Rear Storage Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .314
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
3
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ASSIST Call
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
9-1-1 Call
or 3G (data) network.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
WARNING!
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not • 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
limited to, the following factors:
• Weather.
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
General Information
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal mirror clean.
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or Outside Mirrors
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left And Right Mirror Select
The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position to the normal driving position.
following an adjustment.
3
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
will automatically unfold.
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
Your Vehicle” for further information.
following occurs:
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
unfolded.
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
3
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Approaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
muted.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating SEATS
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and vehicle.
used.
WARNING!
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Power Seats — If Equipped
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Power Seat Recliner Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
Power Lumbar Switch
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
Manual
Seats
—
If Equipped
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
Front Seat Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Height Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. On models that are equipped with remote start, the
once to turn the HI heated seats can be programed to come on during a
• Press the heated seat button
remote start.
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Rear Head Restraints
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
Up, Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there is no occupant in the center seat the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outboard Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment — If
Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on
the middle outer edge of the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
3
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
Driver Memory Switch
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- NOTE:
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
switch, then push the number (1) button within five
memory profile.
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
display which memory position is being set.
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
memory as follows:
Transmitter To Memory
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets). memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
position is being set.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmust select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
mitter within 10 seconds.
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inmemory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed
formation.
by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- within 10 seconds.
ing:
Memory Position Recall
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
•
selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Feaor equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
latch release lever is located behind the front edge of
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers
the hood, slightly off-center to the right.
side of the instrument panel.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
Hood Release
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
vehicle in an unlit area.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
information.
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivprovides increased forward lighting at night by automatity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highmounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
ignition off.
vehicle is out of view.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
NOTE:
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- engine is shut Off.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
Lane Change Assist
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/ the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
Flash-To-Pass
signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will released.
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time. These lights also turn on
when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pushed, or
when the dimmer control is turned completely upward
to the second detent.
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats.
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the lens.
To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted
cupholders — if equipped.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Battery Saver Feature
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex- WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
remain off when the doors are open.
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and
radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre- then turn off.
viously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
Mist Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
to activate this feature.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Setmultifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
further information.
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
following conditions:
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed buttons. The two control modes function differently.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a Always confirm which mode is selected.
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
3
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
displays “ACC Ready.”
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
accelerator pedal.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
To Cancel
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
The following conditions cancel the system:
To Turn Off
• The brake pedal is applied.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to pushing the SET + button.
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
U.S. Speed (mph)
in the EVIC/DID.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph To Decrease Speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
pushing the SET - button.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in the EVIC/DID.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
Metric Speed (km/h)
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h U.S. Speed (mph)
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rewill automatically slow the vehicle.
flected in the EVIC/DID.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rehill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
flected in the EVIC/DID.
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
NOTE:
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to main• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
of the vehicle.
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Metric Speed (km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
Brake Alert
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the EVIC/DID is a warnbraking capacity.
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
When driving with ACC engaged and following a veparking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
be cancelled.
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
passing on the left hand side.
will be cancelled.
ACC Operation At Stop
Overtake Aid
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the ACC SET
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
on ACC system status.
instrument cluster.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
• System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Driver Override
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
Control Ready.”
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
vehicle behind the lower grille.
the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
temporarily occur.
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
examine the windshield and the camera located on the limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporequire cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
To Set A Desired Speed
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or U.S. Speed (mph)
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel- • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rein the EVIC/DID display.
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reTo Resume Speed
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
To Cancel
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed 20 mph (32 km/h).
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
To Turn Off
memory:
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
• The brake pedal is applied.
memory if:
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
heated).
pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
When the system determines that a forward collision is two seconds and then release the brakes.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
FCW Message
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
message will be deactivated.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Button
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
The forward collision button is located on the switch button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED
turns off).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
from warning you of a possible collision with the The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
vehicle in front of you.
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near Panel” for further information.
warns the driver later.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
driver after ignition shut down.
Service FCW Warning
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
NOTE:
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
screens.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW Limited Warning
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function- LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front LaneSense Operation
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
within the lane boundaries.
provided.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn- LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning does not return their hands to the wheel.
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense Warning Button
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
Sense On” message is shown in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
3
3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
of the lane boundary.
left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
7.0 DID Screen — If Equipped
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray • When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
indicator is solid white when only the left lane markand the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
boundary.
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Changing LaneSense Status
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity EQUIPPED
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect and audible indications of the distance between the rear
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
NOTE:
recommendations.
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
ParkSense Sensors
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the deThe four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
further information.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
Arcs — Center
WARNING ALERTS
79-59 in
59-47 in
47-39 in
(200-150 cm)
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30
cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs — Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
3
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS⬙
or
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
will be ON.
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
NOTE:
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly.
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
affect the performance of ParkSense.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
Cleaning The ParkSense System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if NOTE:
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
ing with a detected obstacle.
vehicle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
substitute the driver.
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
tions of this system and recommendations.
for the automatic braking function through ignition
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
cycles.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
changed to the ON/RUN position.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in
the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
ParkSense Sensors
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
direction, depending on the location, type and orientabumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tion of the obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSense Warning Display
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer tion of the obstacle.
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
ParkSense Display
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
Arcs — Center
WARNING ALERTS
79-59 in
59-47 in
47-39 in
(200-150 cm)
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65
cm)
25-12 in
(65-30
cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs — Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
Front Park Assist
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing when the 1st flashing arc appears.
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
No Tone/Solid Arc
No Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
3
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or ⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damIf ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ age the sensors.
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENParkSense System Usage Precautions
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make NOTE:
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
operating properly.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibraan authorized dealer.
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
authorized dealer.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the • ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
radio when it is sounding a tone.
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
application to be delayed.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
CAUTION!
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parktouches the steering wheel after being instructed to
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sysproviding audible/visual instructions, and controlling
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
manually complete the parking maneuver.
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver • New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
side or passenger side).
miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accuNOTE:
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
3
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off • The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
automatically for any of the following conditions:
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
• The parking maneuver is completed.
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
searching for a parking space.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering •
guidance into the parking space.
•
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
•
switch.
•
• Driver’s door is opened.
•
• Rear liftgate is opened.
•
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
Gear position is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
Driver’s door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, switch to change your parking space setting.
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
NOTE:
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
present.
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
parking space for the maneuver).
sequence.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
3
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver. • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
3
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
Switch to Perpendicular” message will show in the
EVIC/DID display. Push the OK button on the left side
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch
back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
Switch to Parallel” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
display.
3
Active ParkSense Searching Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
parking space for the maneuver).
NOTE:
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected When an available parking space has been found, and the
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
parking sequence.
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
3
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver. • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
3
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
3
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON),
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the
OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink Alarm is active.
channels.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
button.
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programthen rapidly after HomeLink has received the freming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
steps.
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
• To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non
— Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 NOTE:
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
Power Sunroof Switches
The power sunroof switches are located to the left The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Opening Sunroof — Express
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
A comfort stop position and full open position are the A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi- for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when
comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically
position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
automatically open to the half open position prior to the opening). Push and hold the switch rearward again, the
sunroof opening). Push the switch rearward and release sunroof will open to the full open position and automatiit again, the sunroof will open to the full open position cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
During Express Open operation, any movement of the partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Opening Power Shade — Express
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
Venting Sunroof — Express
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec- During Express Open operation, any movement of the
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This shade switch will stop the shade.
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially condition until the switch is pushed again.
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade — Express
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
Wind Buffeting
completely.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
Sunroof Maintenance
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
the glass panel.
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
Ignition OFF Operation
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is to the battery and powered at all times.
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
3
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet Power Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse
location F91 to F81.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Console Bin
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
3 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at
all times)
4 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter Location
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the
device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the invertexr.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile
device.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone
provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile
phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
3
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,
towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the
LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and
change the location.
Qi Logo Phone Alignment
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi
your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing
green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone
and reposition it on the charging pad.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle
to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle
moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and
adjusting the cradle in or out.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a
different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be
readjusted.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile
phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to
function normally as it is charging.
WARNING!
Adjustable Finger Tabs
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile
phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s)
such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT.
If metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile phone and wireless charging pad, carefully
remove the mobile phone and allow the metal
object(s) to cool before removing. Failure to wait
until the object(s) cool could result in personal
injury, including burns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature may
not work properly while a mobile phone is being
charged.
3
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
located in the center armrest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Rear Cupholders
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side
of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to
open the glove compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
Console Storage Compartment
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
3
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Upper Console Charging Pad
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
Center Console Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
latches to the base.
section for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Extension Panels
WARNING!
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded.
When the rear seats are moved to the more forward
positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the
extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of
them). The extension panels can be used to extend the
load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between
the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large
items into the cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
Rear Storage Bins
WARNING! (Continued)
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Rear Storage Bins
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if NOTE:
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
• The Windshield Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
turned on and when the ambient temperature is below
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
33 degrees F (0.6° C).
position.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .320 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .326
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .370
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0 Settings. . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings . . . .398
▫ Manual Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .415
▫ Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped . . . .431
䡵 MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .441
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .418 䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .419 䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .464
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Demister Outlet
— Air Outlet
— EVIC/DID Display Controls
— Horn/Driver Air Bag
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Instrument Cluster
Cruise Controls
Storage Compartment
Radio
9 — Passenger Air Bag
10 — Glove Compartment
11 — Lower Switch Bank
12 — Uconnect Feature Controls
— If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Start/Stop Ignition Button
Liftgate Release Button
Dimmer Switches
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
Base EVIC Instrument Cluster
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to the side of the
1. Tachometer
The fuel pump symbol points
vehicle
where
the
fuel
door
is
located.
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
satisfactorily.
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temmation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
perature when driving in hot weather or up mounPanel” for further information.
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
3. Speedometer
upper limits of the normal operating range.
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Premium DID Instrument Cluster
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
1. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID)
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather or up mounsages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furupper limits of the normal operating range.
ther information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
to the side of the
The fuel pump symbol points
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
WARNING!
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
dropped below a specified level.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures
rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Red Warning Light
What It Means
the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
4
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Liftgate Ajar Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Ajar Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Rear Fog Light Indicator
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Forward Collision Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
4
What It Means
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.
White Telltale Indicator Light
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense —
If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC Menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Info
instrument cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start (If Equipped)
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Control Buttons
• LEFT Arrow Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• OK Button
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
Push the OK button to access/select the information
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
following procedure.
Oil Change Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
Oil Change Due
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
within 10 seconds.
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
OFF/LOCK position.
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the EVIC.
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Speedometer
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access Push the OK button to change the speedometer scale
from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life. Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
5. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
screen.
Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, and follow the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not prompts on each screen as needed.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
• Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further informaPush and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
tion.
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following • Coolant Temp
will be displayed:
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the • Transmission Temp
ICON.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To • Oil Temp
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the Displays the actual oil temperature.
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different • Oil Life
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire Displays the remaining oil life.
Pressure System” is displayed.
• Battery Voltage
• Tire Pressure
• Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be Displays the actual battery voltage.
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
ACC SET
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of instrument cluster.
the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Driver Override
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • System Off
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• ACC Proximity Warning
Control Ready.”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after • Average Fuel Economy
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Trip Info
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Vehicle” for further information.
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
LaneSense
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system set- will display the following:
tings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense • Distance
system status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” • Average Fuel Economy
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Elapsed Time
Fuel Economy
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and
hold the OK button to reset feature.
• Range
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Menu Item – If Equipped
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the
Stop/Start status.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informaAudio
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until location that information is displayed.
the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Stored Messages
Upper Left
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• Compass
button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the • Outside Temp (default setting)
number of stored warning messages. Pushing • Time
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
• Range To Empty (RTE)
stored messages are.
• Average MPG or L/100 km
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Time
• None
• Range To Empty
Upper Right
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Compass (default setting)
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Outside Temp
• Trip A Distance
• Time
• Trip B Distance
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Audio Information
• Average MPG or L/100 km
• Digital Speed
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• None
• None
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings, Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, Center Menu
Title)
Center
• Menu Title (Default Setting)
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• OK
• Cancel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The DID Menu items consist of the following:
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start Info — If Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
Driver Information Display (DID) Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Control Buttons
• LEFT Arrow Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• OK Button
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
Push the OK button to access/select the information
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
refer to the following procedure.
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
OFF/LOCK position.
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
within 10 seconds.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you through the Vehicle Info sub-menus and follow the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not prompts on each screen as needed.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
1. Tire Pressure
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID. release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
Speedometer
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the ICON.
the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
Push and release the OK button to change the speedomTo XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the
eter scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
• Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
• Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temp — Automatic Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temp
5. Oil Life
Displays the remaining oil life.
6. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Displays the actual oil temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• System Off
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
DID:
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
ACC SET
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
LaneSense — If Equipped
instrument cluster.
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sysactivity occurs, which may include any of the following:
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
• Distance Setting Change
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG or L/100 km) form while driving.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Trip Info
Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or km that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles will display the following:
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the “LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will • Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km) of Trip A or Trip B since
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
the last reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of • Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
economy (MPG or L/100 km) since the last reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/
Start status.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
1. Upper Left
the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
• Compass
Stored Messages
• Outside Temp. (default)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Time
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
• Range to Empty
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
Pushing the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button will allow
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
you to scroll through the stored messages.
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Upper Right
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• None
4. Gear Display — If Equipped
• Single
• Full PRND (default)
5. Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/
title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or DOWN
arrow to select a desired speed, then push and release
OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist (MSA)
Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a
chime will sound with a pop up warning message when
the set speed is exceeded.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
4
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
On The Faceplate
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
access and change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0 Settings
Push the SETTINGS or the MORE button on the faceplate, then the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options,
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup,
Restore Settings, and Clear Personal Data, Brakes and
System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
touchscreen.
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
even though the headlights are on.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
⬙parade⬙ positions.
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen • Set Language
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with nomenclature, including the trip functions and the naviHeadlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or button on the touchscreen, then select the desired language button on the touchscreen.
⬙parade⬙ positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
• Units
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When in this display, you may select to have the DID,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
“Metric” to make your selection.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
• Touchscreen Beep
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the selected.
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
Voice
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
touchscreen then select from “on” or “off.”
following settings will be available:
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
• Voice Response Length
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a When in this display, you may change the Voice Redesignated turn within a programmed route. To make your sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”
to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Show Command List
• Set Date
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
“Never.”
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding
arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be availAfter pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- able:
screen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
Clock & Date
• Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.”
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
possible collision when you are much closer to the For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
Vehicle”.
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking — lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
If Equipped
zone start point.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Vehicle”.
• ParkSense — If Equipped
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the “Sound” or “Sound and Display”
button.
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
operating information.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected operating information.
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
or “Off.”
BSM not operating to specification.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Equipped
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sysoverlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
the width of the vehicle.
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Lights
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.”
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the • Auto High Beams — If Equipped
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
seconds.
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con• Headlight Illumination On Approach
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selecWhen this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
tion. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Vehicle” for further information.
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
screen and make your selection.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
the touchscreen and make your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights w/Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights w/Lock
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
screen the following settings will be available.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
• Auto Door Locks
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto- w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph or “Off.”
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• Horn w/Lock
NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or • Passive Entry
“2nd Press.”
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch- “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Startscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Remote Door Unlock
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may
choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all
doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
first push of the key fob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.”
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
“Remote Start” or “All Starts.”
• Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is Engine Off Options
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
select from “On” or “Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”
button on the touchscreen and make your selection.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
• Compass Calibration
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch- • Balance/Fade
screen when the compass has been successfully caliThis feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
brated.
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and • Speed Adjusted Volume
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
sensor, and it may give false readings.
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchAudio
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the the touchscreen.
following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Equalizer
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset” to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
• Loudness — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchThis feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. screen, the following settings will be available:
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on • Channel Skip
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
Phone/Bluetooth
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
• Paired Phones
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
This feature shows which phones are paired to the touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
• Subscription Information
Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
the screen or visit the provider online.
reset to default.⬙
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice,
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
on the touchscreen the following settings will be availLocks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
able:
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,
• Clear Personal Data
Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,
or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touch- the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch- button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
touchscreen.
the following settings will be available.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
When in this display you may select one of the auto the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
display settings. To change Mode status, select from ⬙parade⬙ positions.
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
lected.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
even though the headlights are on.
Display
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and ⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Theme
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
This feature will allow you to choose a background
that setting has been selected.
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
background color, highlight color, and button color of the • Controls Screen Time-Out
display screen.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
• Set Language
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the
“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nothat setting has been selected.
menclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” • Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan- Equipped
guage button on the touchscreen.
When this feature is selected, To make your selection,
• Touchscreen Beep
press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark apWhen in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
pears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.
selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Voice
Clock
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Show Command List
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the “12
hrs” or “24 hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the possible collision when you are much closer to the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
Vehicle”.
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking — lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
If Equipped
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
zone start point.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeThe ABA applies additional brake pressure when the hicle”.
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
Vehicle”.
• ParkSense — If Equipped
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,
press and release the “Sound” or “Sound and Display”
button.
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,”
and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
operating information.
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected operating information.
from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check- not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
been selected.
BSM not operating to specification.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Equipped
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to “Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkassist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
the width of the vehicle.
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
rotors, etc.).
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Lights
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
When this feature is selected, the system will automatifollowing settings will be available.
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
• Headlight Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds.
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
• Flash Lights With Lock
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature • Auto Unlock On Exit
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
selected.
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showraising or lowering. To make your selection, press the
ing that setting has been selected.
“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Engine Off Options
setting has been selected.
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the • Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
selected.
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection, • Engine Off Power Delay
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “+” or “-”
button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes,” or “10 minutes.”
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
touchscreen.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touch- NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
screen to select your desired time interval.
directly on the desired setting.
Audio
• Headlight Off Delay
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” touchscreen the following settings will be available:
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Paired Phones
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match • Paired Audio Sources
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
• Channel Skip
the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make and is available for U.S. residents only.
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip Restore Settings
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to System Information
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears After pressing the “System Information” button on the
stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informaon the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able:
version.
• Clear Personal Data
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
External USB device, SD card or AUX electronic device to
be plugged into the port, slot or jack.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Slot
3 — AUX Jack
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
will tune to the next preset station that you have promode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
grammed in the radio preset button.
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once precautions:
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
surface.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
wiping from center to edge.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the
or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from body.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
found in radio frequency safety standards and recomnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
community.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If NOTE:
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
provide reasonable protection against harmful interOperation is subject to the following two conditions:
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
2. This device must accept any interference received,
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
including interference that may cause undesired opcommunications. However, there is no guarantee that
eration.
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
4
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control
2 — Blower Control
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
4 — Temperature Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
7 — MODE Control
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Air Conditioning Operation
There are several blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
operating.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
recirculated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Bi-Level Mode
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrusmall amount through the defrost and side winment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct dow demist outlets.
airflow.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
weather.
Defrost Mode
NOTE:
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode • If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
modes only when necessary.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
Recirculation Control
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
defogging, select the outside air position.
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- Stop/Start System — If Equipped
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
button.
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
Air Outlets
engine running condition.
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped
airflow.
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element loNOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center cated at the base of the windshield.
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
seat passengers.
once the following conditions are met:
Economy Mode
• Activation By Front Defrost
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem- ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Uconnect Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
4
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On 4. Front Defrost Button
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
1. MAX A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPush and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
will turn off.
5. Rear Defrost Button
2. A/C Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of
3. Recirculation Button
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
Push and release to change the current setting, the timer function.
indicator illuminates when ON.
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
• Floor Mode
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
7. Modes
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
window demister outlets.
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
• Mix Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
snowy conditions.
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
• Bi-Level Mode
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windfloor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
when necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
8. Climate Control OFF Button
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
ON/OFF.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temProvides temperature control. Push the button on the perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperafaceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch- tures.
screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen
Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lotouchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
cated at the base of the windshield.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the
once the following conditions are met:
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch- • Activation By Front Defrost
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On Your
Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
Buttons On Your Uconnect Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
screen.
The buttons on your faceplate are also accessible on the
Uconnect system touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
4
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On Your Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On Your Touchscreen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On 3. Recirculation Button
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
Press and release to change the current setting, the
1. MAX A/C Button
indicator illuminates when ON.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press and release to change the current setting, the 5. Front Defrost Button
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feainto manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return to the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
8.4 Only)
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and automatically exit Sync.
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar 9. SYNC
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
warmer temperature settings.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
automatically exit Sync.
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
(Uconnect 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
10. Blower Control
Button On The Touchscreen
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Bi-Level Mode
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed ON/OFF.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- 8.4 Only)
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and Provides the driver with independent temperature conwarmer air from the floor outlets.
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera• Floor Mode
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperaof air is directed through the defrost and side
ture settings.
window demister outlets.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
• Mix Mode
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window time.
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4 Climate Control Functions
Only)
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
temperature settings.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
time.
NOTE:
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0 Only)
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to reguselect Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
late the temperature of the air inside the passenger comneeded.
partment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area,
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lobar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from Recirculation
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
MAX A/C
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
mance.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
A/C is ON.
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
the system to function automatically.
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
as possible.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temunits by selecting the Uconnect customerperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System
touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is disSettings” in this section of the manual.
played, the system will achieve and automatically
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
maintain that comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Automatic Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
selected in Manual operation.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
Vacation Storage
NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatifresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Window Fogging
Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically Outside Air Intake
once the following conditions are met:
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
• Activation By Front Defrost
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
slush, and snow.
• Activation By Rear Defrost
A/C Air Filter
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
The climate control system filters outside air containing
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
below 33° F (0.6° C).
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main• Activation By Remote Start Operation
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
4
Uconnect 5.0
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect 5.0
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
4
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
become more productive when you know exactly how to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
steering wheel if equipped.
navigation at any time.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
to send a personalized text message. For details about
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesMAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
sage to John Smith.”
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
process your message.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 463
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
464 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 465
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
4
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
466 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from so you can still place a second call without being interincoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes rupted by incoming calls.
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmissed calls and text messages while you were using Do
hones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 467
NOTE:
Uconnect System Support:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with • U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
device.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
fications were met.
Sun., Closed
Additional Information
Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .477
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .481
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .482
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .485 䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .485 䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ SafeHold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .520
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .520
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .534
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .537
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .520 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .527 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .552
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .555
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .578
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .564 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .567
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .569
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . .581
. . .581
. . .582
. . .582
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .583
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .587
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .604
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
(FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 1-Speed
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Normal Starting
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait
Extended Park Starting procedure.
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
With Tip Start
CAUTION!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel;
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
hold it
decrease as the engine warms up.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
disengage automatically in 10 seconds.
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automati3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
“Autostop” mode.
will be maintained upon return to an engine running
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
condition.
Occur:
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/ Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Start system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” Screen. In the following situations the engine will not
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further stop:
information.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
pedal depressed.
• Battery charge is low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Engine temp too high.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- • 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUable cabin temperature has not been achieved.
TOSTOP.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower • Steering angle beyond threshold.
speed.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. times without the STOP/START system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
tions of the items listed above.
• Hood is open.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
• Fuel level.
• Accelerator pedal input.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
matically While In Autostop Mode:
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
•
•
•
•
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,
the engine may require a manual restart and the electric
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
park brake may require a manual release (depress brake
applications).
pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
A STOP/START system error occurs.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
STOP/START OFF Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis- The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
play (DID)“ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap- 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the drivpears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your
er’s side headlamp).
authorized dealer.
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
driver’s side headlamp.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures NOTE:
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required. • The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position/mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position/mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position/mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/
RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the
shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
stopped or moving at low speeds.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/
AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling
the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the
highest available gear.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL (N)
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
tion:
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the
DRIVE (D)
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
This range should be used for most city and highway and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission age due to overheating.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
tics under all normal operating conditions.
the transmission may operate differently until the transWhen frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as mission cools down.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT — If Equipped
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
creased to make full use of available engine power.
following steps:
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the 1. Stop the vehicle.
center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
further information.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
5. Restart the engine.
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no shifting between all available gears.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside DRIVE)
operation.
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever forward (-)
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
DRIVE position.
dealer service is required.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
WARNING!
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
Torque Converter Clutch
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been warm.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward
(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
range position can be used to provide an additional gear
reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the driveline components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” for further
information on the various positions and their intended
usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the
4WD LOW
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased remain on solid when the shift is complete.
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Driver Information Display (DID) in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
Selec-Terrain Switch
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press
the “4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out
when the shift is complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver
Information Display (DID) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
transmission to PARK.
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow
2. Turn the engine OFF.
the shift.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete.
5
Neutral Switch
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
Activating The Rear E-Locker
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
conditions must be met:
12. Apply the parking brake.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine 2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine
running.
OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
button once.
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the conditions must be met:
Selec-Terrain Knob.
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
indicator light on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine • Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with
running.
the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
button once.
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
NOTE:
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,
below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and
• It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to
and forth to complete engagement and disengagement
align.
of the E-Locker.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a meswill begin to flash. When the shift is complete the
sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights
instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN
Description
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability in inclem- • Rock — Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
ent weather. Use on and off road on loose traction
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (dependUse for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
ing on certain operating conditions), the transmission
ruts, etc.
may use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
NOTE:
• Sport — This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
with the Off-Road package.
increased to make full use of available engine power.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic
selected.
Brake Control System” in this section for further
information.
• Sand/Mud — Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Panel” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
ordinary cars.
details). This range should be limited to extreme situaAn advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display
Messages
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
water, there are a number of precautions that must be to minimize wave effects.
considered before entering the water:
Flowing Water
Driving Through Water
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm).
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches
(48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
control.
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not Hill Climbing
been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Fourimmediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Maintenance
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Traction Downhill
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent
Control if equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control
System⬙ in this section for further information). Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels
turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
drive straight up or down.
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisIf the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
sion whenever possible.
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may After Driving Off-Road
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
provide traction to complete the climb.
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
values specified in the Service Manual.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
correct the situation.
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or POWER STEERING
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake The electric power steering system will give you good
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
and cleaned as soon as possible.
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
WARNING!
caused an over temperature condition in the power
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
obtained as soon as possible.
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and You can engage the park brake in two ways;
during parking maneuvers.
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feaservice.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect settings.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake The park brake switch is located in the center console.
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but
the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it
can only be released when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,
when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on
the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the park brake is engaging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
brake pedal, then push the park brake switch down
driver is not in the vehicle.
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the car while the parking brake disengages.
WARNING!
You may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt
is made to drive away.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if • The clutch pedal is not pressed.
the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
in RUN.
SafeHold
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will auto- • The driver door is open.
matically engage if all of the following conditions are SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
met:
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
accelerator pedal.
Brake Service Mode
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
• The driver door is open.
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
For manual transmissions, the park brake will automatiYou should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:
service.
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu based
system will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to
normal operation:
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
front axle.
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake Brake System Warning Light
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
stay on for as long as four seconds.
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
tions.
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
This function manages the distribution of the braking vehicle stability and brake performance under most
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. ModifiBrake Assist System (BAS)
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on system detects an emergency braking situation by senswhen the ignition switch is turned to the ON position ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
WARNING! (Continued)
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not the safety of others.
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
WARNING!
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing roll down the hill as normal.
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- activate:
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle • The feature must be enabled.
(Continued)
• The vehicle must be stopped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Park brake must be off.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
remain active.
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
(Continued)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Disabling And Enabling HSA
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
turn to the left.
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
bank below the climate control four times within and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differtwenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
turn on and turn off two times.
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right. wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com- enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
(Continued)
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Partial Off
NOTE:
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally alIndicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
Full Off – If Equipped
will turn off.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
return to ESC On.
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
equipped.
WARNING! (Continued)
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
(Continued)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a NOTE:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenvehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acThe “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
customer has elected to have the Electronic
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMoccur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckoccurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as user’s safety or the safety of others.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
or other vehicles.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excesNOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
available ESC modes.
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives HDC has three states:
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
steering wheel.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
realize the correct course of action through small torques
with brake or throttle application).
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer Enabling HDC
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
steering the vehicle.
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while • Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h).
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC • Parking brake is released.
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
• Driver door is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Activating HDC
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
HDC Target Set Speeds
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
activate
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling
HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
ditions.
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating HDC
• The parking brake is applied.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • Driver door opens.
the following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
for greater than 70 seconds.
application.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
(HDC exits immediately).
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magniFeedback To The Driver
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
Disabling HDC
about the state HDC is in.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
following conditions occur:
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several engine torque and brakes.
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to SSC has three states:
excess speed.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
with brake or throttle application).
cooled sufficiently.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
•
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
•
the following conditions are met:
•
• Driver releases throttle.
•
• Driver releases brake.
•
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Deactivating SSC
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
NOTE:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
application.
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving condi- • Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
tions.
Disabling SSC
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the followmay be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. ing conditions occur:
Driver Override:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
brake application at any time.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
for greater than 70 seconds.
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
Feedback To The Driver:
brakes.
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
WARNING!
about the state SSC is in.
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condiremain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several vehicle speed.
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
spare tires.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Loading
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you the weight referenced here.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuAnd Operating” section of this manual.
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” secsengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
tion of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
Fuel Economy
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
first opportunity.
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
(Continued)
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
WARNING! (Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- Tread Wear Indicators
ping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Emergencies” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maingrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
• Use on Front Tires Only
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended:
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire
sizes are not chainable.
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
CAUTION!
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire
sizes are not chainable.
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
tire chains or traction devices are used with original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling, The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at method is the “forward cross” shown in the following
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
unequal rates.
directional tires that must not be reversed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
mended cold placard pressure.
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warnthe tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
recommended cold placard pressure value.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
CAUTION!
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
NOTE:
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
the tire.
Premium System — If Equipped
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
readings to the receiver module.
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly (DID) will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum
of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic
and to maintain the proper pressure.
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
The TPMS consists of the following components:
pressure values in a different color.
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
value. The EVIC/DID will also display a “SPARE
monitored by the TPMS.
LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service
the flat tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Size Spare
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In
addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
message, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
showing the low tire pressure value in a different
spare tire.
color.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
road tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different
color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. General Information
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update by the party responsible for compliance could void the
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all emis- ering service for the vehicle.
sions regulations and provide optimum
Reformulated Gasoline
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso- Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
line having a posted octane number of 87 burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speoctane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improvide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these prove air quality.
engines.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. PropFUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard system components.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
genates such as ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emissions
control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
582 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
When switching fuel types:
unleaded gasoline.
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 583
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional proif the above recommendations are followed, especially
tection to FCA US LLC engines.
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
Starting
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
may be used.
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuimprove engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
584 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruising Range
Maintenance
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 585
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler NOTE:
cap.
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
586 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 587
2. Remove access door located on right interior trim
panel for release cable with the tip of your key.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
Fuel Door Release Location
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
filler door emergency release.
fuel filler door.
1. Open the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
588 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
Fuel Door Released
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 589
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
bottom of the label is your VIN.
components sometimes specified by purchasers for inGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle cle’s GVWR.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
Tire Size
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load Rim Size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Inflation Pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
590 STARTING AND OPERATING
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
added.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 591
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
TRAILER TOWING
you in understanding the following information:
WARNING!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weightdistributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
592 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a
collision.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
vehicle.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 593
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
594 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 595
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
2.4L/Automatic
with or without
Trailer Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic
with Trailer Tow
Package
Model
Frontal Area
FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
FWD or 4WD
FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq
m)
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Maximum Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
596 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 597
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components, the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended:
put in or on your vehicle.
WARNING!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
598 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 599
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
spare tire.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
personal injury.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
600 STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 601
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
5
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
602 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range.
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 603
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
604 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
NOT ALLOWED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4X4 Models
1-Speed Power
2-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
Transfer Unit
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
• Transmission in
PARK
• Power transfer
unit in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
STARTING AND OPERATING 605
4X4 Models
1-Speed Power
2-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
Transfer Unit
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
Dolly Tow
OK
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer
OK
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front
Rear
ALL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
606 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain 6.
will result.
7.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. 8.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Turn the ignition OFF, remove the Key Fob, and
release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 607
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreunit.
ational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is
adjacent to the 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
any mode position.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
608 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
power transfer unit.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in
NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will
result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 609
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
610 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
Neutral Switch
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 611
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure NOTE:
that there is no vehicle movement.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
13. Apply the parking brake.
If any of these requirements are not met before push14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
OFF, and remove the key fob.
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
tow bar.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
not start the engine.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
18. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the Key Fob, and
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
release the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
612 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 613
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of NOTE:
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
gear clash.
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before push10. Release the brake pedal.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
12. Start the engine.
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
14. Release the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .617 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .632
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .621
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .625
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .644
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
䡵 RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .650
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
from the engine cooling system.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
6
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Torque Patterns
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
against the wheel.
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
Load Floor Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Deflation Button
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
Selecting Sealant Mode
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruindicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
ment panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629
(E) After Driving:
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air If
Mode position.
1.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflastem.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authoreinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
Volt outlet.
using the Tire Service Kit.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
the vehicle.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
service center.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
panel after the tire has been repaired.
of it accordingly.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as poshousing.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
WARNING!
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
bottle is locked into place.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
vehicle.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the
back side of the load floor and place the hook over the
top body in white flange and weather seal. This will
hold the load floor up while obtaining the jack and
spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 633
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
6
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
Jack And Tool Assembly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack Preparations For Jacking
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
points holds the jack handle in place.
areas.
7. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635
3. Set the parking brake.
Jacking Instructions
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
WARNING!
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
6
Jacking Locations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639
6
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Engagement Point
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 641
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
use, and operation.
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
NOTE:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
642 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Assembled Jack
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 643
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
tighten the wheel bolts.
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
644 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the precautions.
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
CAUTION!
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 645
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
6
Positive Battery Post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
646 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 647
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in serious injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
648 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
discharged battery.
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
you should have the battery and charging system in- REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.
spected at your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 649
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
650 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your
recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
recommended anchor points or emergency towing anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any
other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has
reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps.
ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious
injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 feet from the
recovery area when using the recovery strap.
RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
chains, or winch cables.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 651
Using Recovery Strap
2. Apply the parking brake.
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center
console.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the shift lever override access hole (at the right front
corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
secure and parked.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
652 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
FWD MODELS
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 653
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
the Ground
FWD MODELS
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST
METHOD
Front
ALL
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
6
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent NOTE:
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipdisabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadverment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
654 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. Note that the Safehold
feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the
driver’s door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you
are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
position, you must manually disable the Electric Park
Brake each time the driver’s door is opened, by pressing The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
the brake pedal and then pushing the EPB switch down. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
so that the vehicle can be moved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 655
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
656 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power
Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction,
with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following
conditions:
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The transmission must be in PARK.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .661
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
▫ Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
▫ Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . .722
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
▫ Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . .723
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
▫ Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . .723
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .720
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
GENUINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
— Oil Fill Cap
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- start this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ento the I/M station.
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interAPI Certified engine oils.
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 enconcern for fleet customers.
gine oils.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L, 2.4L
Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also
shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certiengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- ber should not be used.
ment” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomyour area.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic Engine Oils
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added To Engine Oil
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi- able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommaintenance interval if applicable.
mended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should
change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb
and remove by pulling hose (If Equipped) away from
air cleaner filter cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 — Screws
Air Cleaner Air Hose — If Equipped
1 — Air Filter Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 — Quick Connect Clip
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
7
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the
housing assembly and install air hose (if equipped).
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be • Rib or belt wear
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt viced at an authorized dealer.
body)
Conditions that would require replacement:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
7
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
Console Closeout Panel
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Hush Panel
Air Filter Cover Location
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicaout and lift up.
tors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
A/C Air Filter
Body Lubrication
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependyear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWindshield Wiper Blades
sary.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the folCAUTION!
lowing points:
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
7
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Front Wipers
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
is in the full up position.
glass.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
windshield.
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
vehicle.
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
7
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
Installing The Rear Wiper
Adding Washer Fluid
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass The windshield and rear window washers share the same
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
glass.
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without residual water.
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
vehicle.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the containers.
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
Cooling System
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
WARNING!
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If down the face of the condenser.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 NOTE:
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Maproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
terial Standard MS.90032.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
local authorized dealer.
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomtions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
(−37°C) are anticipated.
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionOAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
possible.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
WARNING! (Continued)
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to maintenance intervals.
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
WARNING!
components.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
WARNING! (Continued)
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
may adversely affect seals.
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
CAUTION!
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
directly on the mirror.
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
7
Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
Blade Fuse
–
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
F15
F16
F17
F18
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module - PCM (Diesel Only)
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Fuel Injection
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - If Equipped
Not Used
Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power Take-Off Unit
(PTU) / Brake System Module (BSM) - If Equipped/Brake
Pedal Switch/Back Up Switch (Diesel Only)
Not Used
Ign Coil (Gas) / Engine Sensor (Diesel)
Not Used
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709
Cavity
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F23
Blade Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
–
5 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
50 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
F24
F25B
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
15 Amp Blue
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Starter Solenoid
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
Voltage Stability Module (VSM) Feed #2 - If Equipped with
Stop/Start Engine Option
Rear Wiper - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Front Washer - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
Not Used
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used
Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F40
F41
F41
Blade Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
60 Amp Yellow
50 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F42
F43
–
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) - If Equipped
HVAC Blower Motor
Trailer Tow Park Light - If Equipped
Headlamp Washer Pump - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
Voltage Stability Module - Feed 1 - If Equipped with Stop/
Start Engine Option
Trailer Tow Electric Brake Module - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711
Cavity
F44
F45
F46
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55
Blade Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
F56
15 Amp Blue
–
F57
20 Amp Yellow
–
Description
Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector - If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - If Equipped
Sunroof - If Equipped
Driver Door Module - If Equipped
Power Inverter (115V A/C) - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Not Used
Front Wipers - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Brake System Module & Valves
Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
Blind Spot Sensors / Compass / Rearview Camera / Trunk
Lamp With Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric
Steering Column Lock (ESL)
Trailer Tow Lights Left - If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F58
F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
F65
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
F66
F67
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
–
–
F68
–
–
Description
Occupant Classification Module/VSM/ESC
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) If Equipped
Power Outlet - Center Console
Trailer Tow Lights Right - If Equipped
Windshield de-icer - If Equipped
Front Heated/Vented Seats - If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel - If Equipped
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver
Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If
Equipped with Stop/Start option
HVAC (ECC) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver
Assist System Module (DASM) / Park Assist (PAM) - If
Not Equipped with Stop/Start Option
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713
Cavity
F69
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
69A
10 Amp Red
–
F70
5 Amp Tan
–
F71
20 Amp Yellow
–
F72
F73
F74
F75
F76
F77
F78
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
Description
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) / Active Grill Shutter
(AGS) - If Equipped with Gas Engine
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) - If Equipped with Diesel Engine
Intelligent Battery Sensor If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
HID Headlamp Right if Equipped with Stop/Start Engine
Option
Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Back Up - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped
Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port / Digital TV (Japan Only)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F79
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87A
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
F88
15 Amp Blue
–
F89
F90
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
Description
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Radio / CD - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Controller Module (Gas)
Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Left
Not Used
Horns - If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
HID Headlamp Left - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine
Option
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM) / Electrochromatic
Mirror / Smart Camera Module - If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling - If Equipped
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715
Cavity
F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
–
F96
F97
F98
F99
F100
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Power Outlet Rear - If Equipped - Customer Selectable
Not Used
Brake System Module (BSM) - Pump Motor
Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Right
Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain Sensor / Sunroof - If
Equipped / Passenger Window Switch / Power Outlet
Console / Digital TV (Japan Only)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Audio Amplifier - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F13
F32
F36
F38
F43
F48
F49
F50
F51
F53
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
Deadbolt All Unlock
Washer Pump Front
Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
Lumbar Support
Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 717
Cavity
F89
F91
F92
F93
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
Description
Door Locks – Driver Unlock
Fog Lamp Front Left
Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
718 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
You may:
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
VEHICLE STORAGE
Bulb Number
TL212–2
PLW214–2A
WL212–2
Cargo Lamp
Overhead Console Lamp
Reading Lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 719
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps
License Plate Lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Bulb Number
HIR2
D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
WY21W
H11LL
LED ( Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
W16W or 921
W5W
7
720 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmothe lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
WARNING!
accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electroHeadlamps — If Equipped
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge dealer for service.
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source 1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
gain access to the headlamp bulb cap.
BULB REPLACEMENT
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 721
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to 7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and
unlock it.
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and 8. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
1. Open the hood.
then connect the replacement bulb.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
CAUTION!
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
assembly from the lamp housing.
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
ment bulb.
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
722 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if removed.
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise
to lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
6. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)
gain access to the bulb.
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp 2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
housing.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 723
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and 8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
lamp housing until it locks in place.
10. Close the liftgate.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
the vehicle.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to 3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
panel.
disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
724 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
lamp.
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
11. Close the liftgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 725
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula)
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
15.8 Gallons
60 Liters
5.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
7
726 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L
Engine
Engine Oil – 3.2L
Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 2.4L
Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engines
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Standard
MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 727
Component
Fuel Selection – 2.4L
and 3.2L Engines
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
728 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
730 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Disindicator system. The oil change indicator system will
play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
for further information.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
concern for fleet customers.
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat- Severe Duty All Models
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 731
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
732 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 733
Replace spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
734 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .737
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .741
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .738
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .738
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .739
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .742
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
736 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .744
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 737
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
738 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426-5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 739
In Mexico Contact
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
740 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 741
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
742 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and and/or components is written in straightforward lanRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
mation that students and professional technicians need in you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 743
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce- All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
744 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
WARNING!
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
746 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .187
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 67
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 87
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 70
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 116, 328
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .669
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 677
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .442, 445
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675, 676
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .421, 426, 432, 441, 675
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 331
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 747
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691, 725
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 37
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .421, 432, 441
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 699
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699, 728
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698, 699
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698, 728
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .296
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 674
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
748 INDEX
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 696
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696, 728
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718, 720
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 718
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659, 660, 667
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 581
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .662
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .107
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .105
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 749
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .98
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .94
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .694
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690, 695
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .691, 725, 726
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 358
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
750 INDEX
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 423, 424
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 337
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 337
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Driver Information Display (DID)
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.581
.296
.512
.134
.520
.520
.532
INDEX 751
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .183, 187
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .335
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .280
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .361
Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .662
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659, 660
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 581
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665, 725, 726
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659, 660, 667
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666, 725
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 475
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
752 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578, 581
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 581
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 688
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 677
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668, 726
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 170, 355, 721
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581, 582
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .726
Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 337, 722
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 753
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578, 581
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577, 726
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .282, 289
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.577
.577
.487
.651
.705
.592
.591
.589
. . . . . . . . .617
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.166
.720
.704
.167
.171
.169
.166
.171
10
754 INDEX
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .171
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .321, 324, 332, 333, 349, 355
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 372
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 635
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 755
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Key Fob
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 718
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 165
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 116, 328
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718, 720
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 358
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
756 INDEX
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .338
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .174
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 356
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 337, 722
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 720
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718, 720
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .342, 569
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 170, 355, 721, 723
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .332, 355
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 757
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663, 741
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .338, 662
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
758 INDEX
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .577, 726
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665, 726
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668, 726
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666, 725
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667, 725
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 742
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 239
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .548
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 759
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .296
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .694
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 19, 29, 34, 44
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 239
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . .609
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .609
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .612
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
760 INDEX
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .416
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .33, 392
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 392
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .61
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .64
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 761
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 116
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 56, 59
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 151
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 148
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 157
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 331
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
762 INDEX
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power Transfer
Unit Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609, 612
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 170, 355, 721
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 559, 560
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185, 186
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 187
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 474, 475
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting And Operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 475
Starting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 475
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 763
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .416
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308, 718
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443, 718
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .67
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532, 593
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .432, 441
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .547, 548
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 552, 558, 559, 743
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552, 558, 559
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 549
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
764 INDEX
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541, 552
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 559, 560
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Tire Service Kit . . . .620, 621, 622, 625, 626, 628, 629, 630
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591, 595, 652
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .604
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . .595, 596
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 698
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 765
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .282
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 355, 721
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .33, 392
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 33, 392
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .390
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 588
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443, 718
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
766 INDEX
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 687
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 295
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 687
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16KL74-126-AB
16MK74-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Second
Edition
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement